1 @c Copyright (C) 1988,1989,1992,1993,1994,1995,1996,1997,1998,1999,2000
2 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
4 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
7 @chapter Target Description Macros
8 @cindex machine description macros
9 @cindex target description macros
10 @cindex macros, target description
11 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
13 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
14 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
15 @file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
16 that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
17 into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
18 a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
19 includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
23 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
24 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
25 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
26 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
27 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
28 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
29 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
30 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
31 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
32 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
33 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
34 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
35 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
36 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
37 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
38 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
39 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
40 * Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
41 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
42 * Misc:: Everything else.
46 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
48 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
50 @c prevent bad page break with this line
51 You can control the compilation driver.
54 @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
55 @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
56 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
57 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
58 option takes--zero, for many options.
60 By default, this macro is defined as
61 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
62 properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
63 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
64 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
67 @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
68 @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
69 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
70 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
71 option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
72 @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
74 By default, this macro is defined as
75 @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
76 properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
77 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
78 should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
81 @findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
82 @item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
83 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
84 stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
85 boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
86 generated, zero otherwise.
88 By default, this macro is defined as
89 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
90 options properly. You need not define
91 @code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
92 options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
93 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
94 for additional options.
96 @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
97 @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
98 A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
99 the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
101 If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
105 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
106 pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
107 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP.
109 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
111 @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
112 @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
113 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
114 @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
115 by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
117 This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
118 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
121 @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
122 @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
123 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
124 @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
125 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
127 This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
128 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
131 @findex NO_BUILTIN_WCHAR_TYPE
132 @item NO_BUILTIN_WCHAR_TYPE
133 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
134 @code{__WCHAR_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__WCHAR_TYPE__} must then be
135 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
137 This should be defined if @code{WCHAR_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
138 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
141 @findex NO_BUILTIN_WINT_TYPE
142 @item NO_BUILTIN_WINT_TYPE
143 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
144 @code{__WINT_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__WINT_TYPE__} must then be
145 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
147 This should be defined if @code{WINT_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
148 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
151 @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
152 @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
153 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
154 pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
155 @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
156 @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
158 Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
163 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
164 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
166 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
167 for GCC to pass to front ends..
169 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
173 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
174 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
175 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
177 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
178 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
179 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
180 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC.
184 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
185 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
186 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
187 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
189 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
191 @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
193 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
194 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
195 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
198 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
202 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
203 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
204 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
206 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
210 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
211 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
212 command given to the linker.
214 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
215 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
219 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
220 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
221 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
222 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
224 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
225 passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
228 @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
230 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
231 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
232 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
234 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
235 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
239 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
240 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
241 the very end of the command given to the linker.
243 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
247 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
248 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
251 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
252 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
253 string constant that provides the specification.
255 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
257 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
258 related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
259 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
262 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
263 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
264 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
267 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
270 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
271 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
273 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
276 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
280 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
281 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
282 %@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
283 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
285 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
286 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
289 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
290 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
293 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
294 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
297 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
298 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
299 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
300 @file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
301 linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
302 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
303 pass @samp{-L} options to it.
305 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
306 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
307 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
308 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
309 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
310 This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
311 not affect @samp{-L} options.
313 @findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
314 @item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
315 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
316 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
317 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
318 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
319 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
322 @findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
323 @item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
324 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
325 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
326 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
327 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
329 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
330 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
331 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
332 @xref{Target Fragment}.
334 @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
335 @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
336 Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
337 a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
338 indicates an absolute file name.
340 @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
341 @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
342 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
343 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
344 try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
346 @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
348 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
349 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
350 when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
351 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
352 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
354 @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
355 @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
356 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
357 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
358 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
360 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
361 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
362 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
363 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
364 @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
367 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
368 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
369 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
370 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
371 used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
373 @findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
374 @item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
375 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
376 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
377 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
378 initialize the necessary environment variables.
380 @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
381 @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
382 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
383 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
384 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
385 comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
387 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
388 @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
390 @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
391 @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
392 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
393 system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
394 directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
395 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
397 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
400 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
401 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
402 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
403 standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
404 try when searching for header files.
406 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
407 @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
409 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
410 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
411 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
412 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
413 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
415 @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
416 @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
417 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
418 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
419 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
420 @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
421 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
422 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
423 and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
424 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
426 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
427 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
428 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
429 for C++-only directories,
430 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
431 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
432 the array with a null element.
434 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
435 if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
436 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
437 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
439 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
442 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
444 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
445 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
446 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
453 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
457 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
460 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
463 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
466 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
469 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
472 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
475 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
479 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
482 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
485 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
486 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
489 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
492 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
495 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
498 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
501 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
510 @node Run-time Target
511 @section Run-time Target Specification
512 @cindex run-time target specification
513 @cindex predefined macros
514 @cindex target specifications
516 @c prevent bad page break with this line
517 Here are run-time target specifications.
520 @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
522 Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
523 define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
524 These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
527 In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
528 made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
529 @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
530 predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
532 For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
535 "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
538 The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
539 and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
540 @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
542 @findex extern int target_flags
543 @item extern int target_flags;
544 This declaration should be present.
546 @cindex optional hardware or system features
547 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
549 This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
550 enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
551 For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
552 the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
553 use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
554 by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
557 Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
558 Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}. It is
559 recommended that a helper macro @code{TARGET_MASK_@var{featurename}}
560 is defined for each bit-value to test, and used in
561 @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} and @code{TARGET_SWITCHES}. For
565 #define TARGET_MASK_68020 1
566 #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & TARGET_MASK_68020)
569 One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
570 of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
571 frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
572 Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
573 macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
575 @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
576 @item TARGET_SWITCHES
577 This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
578 bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
579 with a subgrouping for each command option.
581 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
582 name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
583 @code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
584 displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
585 by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
586 string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
587 for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
588 actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
590 One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
591 this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
592 target options act starting with that value.
594 Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
595 with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
598 #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
599 @{ @{ "68020", TARGET_MASK_68020, "" @}, \
600 @{ "68000", -TARGET_MASK_68020, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
601 @{ "", TARGET_MASK_68020, "" @}@}
604 @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
606 This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
607 options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
608 subgrouping for each command option.
610 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
611 of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
612 The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
613 given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
614 by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
616 Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
617 given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
618 will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
621 extern char *m88k_short_data;
622 #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
623 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
626 @findex TARGET_VERSION
628 This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
629 describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
630 description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
634 #define TARGET_VERSION \
635 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
637 #define TARGET_VERSION \
638 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
642 @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
643 @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
644 Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
645 a particular target machine. You can define a macro
646 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
647 defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
650 Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
651 @samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
653 @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
654 @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
655 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
656 various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
657 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
658 of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
659 used as the default values for the other command line options.
661 @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
662 specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
664 @var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
666 You should not use this macro to change options that are not
667 machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
668 optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
669 machine-specific optimizations.
671 @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
672 this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
675 @findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
676 @item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
677 Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
678 pointer. If this macro is defined, GCC will turn on the
679 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
683 @section Storage Layout
684 @cindex storage layout
686 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
687 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
688 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
689 @xref{Run-time Target}.
692 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
693 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
694 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
695 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
696 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
697 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
698 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
699 macro need not be a constant.
701 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
702 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
704 @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
705 @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
706 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
707 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
709 @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
710 @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
711 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
712 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
713 memory locations and registers; GCC fundamentally assumes that the
714 order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
715 macro need not be a constant.
717 @findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
718 @item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
719 Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
720 constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
721 used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
722 based on preprocessor defines.
724 @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
725 @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
726 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
727 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
728 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
729 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
731 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
734 @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
736 Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
737 unit (byte); normally 8.
739 @findex BITS_PER_WORD
741 Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
743 @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
744 @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
745 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
746 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
747 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
749 @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
751 Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
753 @findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
754 @item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
755 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
756 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
757 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
761 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
762 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
763 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
765 @findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
766 @item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
767 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
768 extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
769 be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
771 You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
772 to the width of @code{Pmode}.
775 @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
776 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
777 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
778 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
781 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
782 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
783 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
784 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
785 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
788 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
789 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
790 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
791 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
792 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
793 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
795 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
797 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
798 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
799 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
800 should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
802 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
803 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
804 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
805 should also be done for the return value of functions.
807 If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
808 promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
810 @findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
811 @item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
812 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
813 should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
814 function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
815 and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
817 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
819 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
820 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
821 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
824 @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
826 Define this macro if there is a guaranteed alignment for the stack
827 pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression
828 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a
829 default if PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY is not defined.
831 @findex PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
832 @item PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
833 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
834 the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
835 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). If STACK_BOUNDARY is
836 also defined, this macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger
839 @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}
840 If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
841 to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies
842 a less strict alignment than @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may
843 be momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
845 @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
846 @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
847 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
849 @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
850 @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
851 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
853 @findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
854 @item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
855 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
856 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
857 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
858 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
860 @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
861 @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
862 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
863 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
864 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
865 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
867 @findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
868 @item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
869 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
870 alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GCC uses
871 this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
872 @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
874 @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
875 @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
876 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
877 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
878 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
879 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
881 @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
882 @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
883 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
884 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
885 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
886 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
888 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
891 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
892 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
893 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
894 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
896 @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
897 @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
898 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
899 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
900 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
901 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
904 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
906 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
907 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
908 constants can be done inline.
910 @findex LOCAL_ALIGNMENT
911 @item LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
912 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
913 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
914 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
915 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
917 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
919 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
920 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
922 @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
923 @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
924 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
925 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
927 Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
928 that results from an empty field.
930 @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
931 @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
932 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
933 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
935 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
936 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
938 @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
939 @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
940 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
941 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
942 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
944 @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
945 @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
946 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
947 alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
949 The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
950 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
951 entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
952 field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
953 structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
956 Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
957 would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
958 alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
959 bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
961 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
962 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
964 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
965 bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
966 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
967 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
969 The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
970 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
971 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
973 Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
974 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
975 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
977 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
978 bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
979 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
998 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
999 sizeof (struct foo1));
1000 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1001 sizeof (struct foo2));
1006 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1007 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1009 @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1010 @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1011 Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
1012 aligning a bitfield within the structure.
1014 @findex STRUCT_FORCE_BLK
1015 @item STRUCT_FORCE_BLK (@var{field})
1016 Return 1 if a structure containing @var{field} should be accessed using
1019 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{c4x.h} for an example
1020 of how to use this macro to prevent a structure having a floating point
1021 field from being accessed in an integer mode.
1023 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
1024 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1025 Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a type
1026 (given by @var{type} as a tree node) when the size computed in the
1027 usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment is @var{specified}.
1029 The default is to round @var{computed} up to a multiple of @var{specified}.
1031 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE_UNIT
1032 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1033 Similar to @code{ROUND_TYPE_SIZE}, but sizes and alignments are
1034 specified in units (bytes). If you define @code{ROUND_TYPE_SIZE},
1035 you must also define this macro and they must be defined consistently
1038 @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
1039 @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1040 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1041 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1042 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1045 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1046 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1048 @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1049 @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1050 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1051 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1052 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1053 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1054 (DImode)} is assumed.
1056 @findex VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
1057 @item VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P(@var{mode})
1058 Define this macro to be nonzero if the port is prepared to handle insns
1059 involving vector mode @var{mode}. At the very least, it must have move
1060 patterns for this mode.
1062 @findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
1063 @item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1064 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1065 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1066 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1067 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1068 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1069 having its mode specified.
1071 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1072 would most commonly define this macro if the
1073 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1076 @findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1077 @item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1078 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1079 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1080 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1082 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1083 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1084 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1086 @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1087 @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1088 A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1089 @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1090 @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1091 @var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1092 a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1093 the value is already known to be out of range.
1095 If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1096 set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1097 Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1098 incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1100 This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1102 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1103 @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1104 A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1105 There are three defined values:
1108 @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1109 @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1110 This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1111 need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1113 @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1114 @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1115 This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1117 @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1118 @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1119 This code indicates any other format.
1122 The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1123 (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1124 format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1125 supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1127 The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1128 memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1129 machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
1131 @findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1132 @item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1133 GCC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1134 so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1135 Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1136 If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GCC uses the traditional
1137 implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1138 (especially if you have provided an implementation of
1139 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1140 compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1141 If you are writing a new port, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1143 If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
1147 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1149 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1150 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1151 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1152 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1155 @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1157 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1158 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1160 @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1161 @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1162 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1163 machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1164 Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1165 @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1167 @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1168 @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1169 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1170 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1171 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1174 @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1175 @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1176 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1177 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1179 @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1180 @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1181 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1182 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1183 @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1184 largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1187 @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1188 @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1189 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1190 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1191 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1192 macro must be at least 64.
1194 @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1195 @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1196 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1197 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1198 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1200 @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1201 @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1202 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1203 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1204 @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1205 largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1208 @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1209 @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1210 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1211 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1213 @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1214 @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1215 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1216 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1219 @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1220 @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1221 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1222 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1225 @findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1226 @item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1227 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1228 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1229 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1230 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1233 @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1234 @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1235 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1236 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1237 always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1238 and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1240 @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1241 @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1242 A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1243 only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1244 of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1245 @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1247 If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1251 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1252 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1253 contents of the string.
1255 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1256 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1257 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1258 of the data type names defined in the function
1259 @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1260 omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1263 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1266 @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1268 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1269 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1270 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1271 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1273 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1277 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1278 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1279 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1282 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1284 @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1285 @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1286 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1287 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1290 @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1291 @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1292 Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1293 characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1294 @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1295 largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1300 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1301 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1302 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1303 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1306 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1308 @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1309 @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1310 Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1313 If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1314 @code{struct objc_selector *}.
1316 @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1317 @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1318 Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1319 into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1320 Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1323 On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1324 selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1328 A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1333 @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1336 @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1337 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1338 @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1346 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1347 @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1351 @section Register Usage
1352 @cindex register usage
1354 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1355 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1357 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1358 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1359 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1360 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1361 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1364 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1365 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1366 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1367 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1368 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1371 @node Register Basics
1372 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1374 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1375 Registers have various characteristics.
1378 @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1379 @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1380 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1381 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1382 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1383 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1385 @item FIXED_REGISTERS
1386 @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1387 @cindex fixed register
1388 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1389 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1390 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1391 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1392 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1393 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1394 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1396 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1397 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1398 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1400 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1401 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1402 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1403 the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1404 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1406 @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1407 @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1408 @cindex call-used register
1409 @cindex call-clobbered register
1410 @cindex call-saved register
1411 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1412 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1413 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1414 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1417 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1418 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1419 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1421 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1422 @item HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1423 @cindex call-used register
1424 @cindex call-clobbered register
1425 @cindex call-saved register
1426 A C expression that is non-zero if it is not permissible to store a
1427 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1428 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1429 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1430 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1432 @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1434 @findex call_used_regs
1435 @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1436 Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify five variables
1437 @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}, @code{global_regs},
1438 (these three are of type @code{char []}), @code{reg_names} (of type
1439 @code{const char * []}) and @code{reg_class_contents} (of type
1440 @code{HARD_REG_SET}).
1441 Before the macro is called @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}
1442 @code{reg_class_contents} and @code{reg_names} have been initialized
1443 from @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS},
1444 @code{REG_CLASS_CONTENTS} and @code{REGISTER_NAMES}, respectively,
1445 @code{global_regs} has been cleared, and any @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1446 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}} command
1447 options have been applied.
1449 This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1452 You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1454 @cindex disabling certain registers
1455 @cindex controlling register usage
1456 If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1457 flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1458 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1459 registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1460 the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1461 is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1463 (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1464 of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1465 controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1466 these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1468 @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1469 @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1470 If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1471 @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1472 @code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1473 avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1476 @findex INCOMING_REGNO
1477 @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1478 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1479 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1480 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1481 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1484 @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1485 @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1486 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1487 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1488 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1489 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1495 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1496 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1500 @node Allocation Order
1501 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1502 @cindex order of register allocation
1503 @cindex register allocation order
1505 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1506 Registers are allocated in order.
1509 @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1510 @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1511 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1512 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1513 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1515 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1516 (all else being equal).
1518 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1519 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1520 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1521 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1522 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1524 @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1525 @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1526 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1527 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1529 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1530 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1531 register; and so on.
1533 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1534 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1536 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1539 @node Values in Registers
1540 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1542 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1543 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1544 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1547 @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1548 @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1549 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1550 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1553 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1554 definition of this macro is
1557 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1558 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1562 @findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1563 @item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1564 A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1567 (subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1570 This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1571 registers, like Sparc v9.
1573 @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1574 @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1575 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1576 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1577 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1578 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1581 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1584 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1585 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1587 @cindex register pairs
1588 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1589 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1590 odd register numbers for such modes.
1592 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1593 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1594 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1595 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1597 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1598 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1599 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1600 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1601 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1602 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1605 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1606 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1607 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1608 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1609 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1610 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1612 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1613 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1614 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1615 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1616 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1617 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1618 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1619 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1620 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1622 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1623 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1624 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1625 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1626 constraints for those instructions.
1628 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1629 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1630 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1631 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1632 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1634 @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1635 @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1636 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1637 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1639 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1640 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1641 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1642 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1643 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1644 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1646 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1647 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1650 @findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1651 @item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1652 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1653 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1654 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1657 @node Leaf Functions
1658 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1660 @cindex leaf functions
1661 @cindex functions, leaf
1662 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1663 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1664 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1665 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1668 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1669 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1670 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1671 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1672 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1675 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1676 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1677 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1681 @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1682 @item LEAF_REGISTERS
1683 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1684 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1687 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1688 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1689 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1690 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1693 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1694 the treatment of leaf functions.
1696 @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1697 @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1698 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1699 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1701 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1702 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1703 will cause the compiler to abort.
1705 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1706 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1710 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1711 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1712 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1713 treat leaf functions specially. They can test the C variable
1714 @code{current_function_is_leaf} which is nonzero for leaf functions.
1715 @code{current_function_is_leaf} is set prior to local register allocation
1716 and is valid for the remaining compiler passes. They can also test the C
1717 variable @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for
1718 leaf functions which only use leaf registers.
1719 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after reload and is
1720 only useful if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1721 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1722 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1724 @node Stack Registers
1725 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1727 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1728 ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1729 Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1730 numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1732 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1733 they must be consecutively numbered.
1738 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1740 @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1741 @item FIRST_STACK_REG
1742 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1745 @findex LAST_STACK_REG
1746 @item LAST_STACK_REG
1747 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1751 @node Register Classes
1752 @section Register Classes
1753 @cindex register class definitions
1754 @cindex class definitions, register
1756 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1757 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1758 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1759 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1761 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1762 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1763 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1767 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1768 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1769 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1770 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1772 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1773 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1774 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1775 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1776 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1779 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1780 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1782 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1783 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1784 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1785 them in operand constraints.
1787 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1788 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1789 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1790 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1791 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1793 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1794 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1795 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1798 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1799 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1800 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1801 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1802 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1804 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1805 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1806 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1807 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1808 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1809 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1810 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1811 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1812 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1815 @findex enum reg_class
1816 @item enum reg_class
1817 An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1818 as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1819 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1820 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1821 tells how many classes there are.
1823 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1824 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1825 in many of the tables described below.
1827 @findex N_REG_CLASSES
1829 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1832 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1835 @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1836 @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1837 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1838 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1840 @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1841 @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1842 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1843 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1844 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1845 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1847 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1848 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1849 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1850 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1851 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
1852 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
1855 @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1856 @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1857 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1858 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1859 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1862 @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1863 @item BASE_REG_CLASS
1864 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1865 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1866 which is the register value plus a displacement.
1868 @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1869 @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1870 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1871 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1872 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1873 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1875 @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1876 @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1877 A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1878 letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1879 value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1880 the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1881 corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1882 to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1884 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1885 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1886 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1887 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1888 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1889 allocated such a hard register.
1891 @findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1892 @item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1893 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1894 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1895 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1896 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1897 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1898 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1900 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1901 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1902 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1903 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1904 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1905 allocated such a hard register.
1907 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1908 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1909 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1910 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1911 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1912 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1913 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1914 only if neither labeling works.
1916 @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1917 @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1918 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1919 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1920 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1921 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1925 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1928 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1929 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1930 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1931 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1932 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1934 If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1935 you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1936 certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1937 certain kinds of registers.
1939 @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1940 @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1941 Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1942 input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1943 @var{class}, unchanged.
1945 @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1946 @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1947 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1948 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1949 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1952 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1953 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1955 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1958 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1959 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1961 @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1962 @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1963 @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1964 @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1965 @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1966 @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1967 Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1968 from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1969 @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1970 from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1971 registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1972 to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1973 and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1974 PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1977 You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1978 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1979 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1980 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1981 you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1982 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1983 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1985 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1986 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1987 should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1988 requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1989 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1992 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1993 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1994 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1995 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1996 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1998 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1999 intermediate register), you should define patterns for
2000 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2001 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
2002 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2003 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2006 Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
2007 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2008 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2009 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2010 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2011 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2013 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2014 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2015 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
2016 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2018 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2019 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2020 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2021 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2022 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
2023 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2026 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2027 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2028 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2029 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2030 those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
2031 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2032 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2033 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2035 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2037 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
2038 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2039 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2040 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2041 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2042 defined by this macro.
2044 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2045 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2047 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2048 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2049 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2050 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2051 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2052 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2053 same as that of @var{mode}.
2055 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2056 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2057 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2060 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2061 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2062 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2063 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2064 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2067 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2068 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2069 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2071 @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2072 @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2073 On some machines, it is risky to let hard registers live across arbitrary
2074 insns. Typically, these machines have instructions that require values
2075 to be in specific registers (like an accumulator), and reload will fail
2076 if the required hard register is used for another purpose across such an
2079 Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2080 value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
2081 compiler will try to minimize the lifetime of hard registers.
2083 It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2084 unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2085 that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2086 with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2087 spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2088 should not define this macro at all.
2090 @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2091 @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2092 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2093 to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2094 registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2096 The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2097 register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
2098 used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
2099 allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2100 registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2101 for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2102 @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2103 register. If there would not be another register available for
2104 reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2105 the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2108 @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2109 @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2110 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2111 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2113 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2114 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2115 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2116 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2118 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2121 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE
2122 If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers for
2123 which the compiler may not change modes arbitrarily.
2125 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P(@var{from}, @var{to})
2126 A C expression that is true if, for a register in
2127 @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE}, the requested mode punning is illegal.
2129 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2130 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2131 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2132 does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2133 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE}
2134 as @code{FLOAT_REGS} and @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P} restricts
2135 mode changes to same-size modes.
2137 Compare this to IA-64, which extends floating-point values to 82-bits,
2138 and stores 64-bit integers in a different format than 64-bit doubles.
2139 Therefore @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P} is always true.
2142 Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2146 @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2147 @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2148 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2149 letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2150 particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2151 letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2152 the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2153 not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2156 @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2157 @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2158 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2159 letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2160 (@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2162 If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2163 @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2164 range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2165 letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2167 @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2168 @code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2169 or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2170 between these kinds.
2172 @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2173 @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2174 A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2175 letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
2176 be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2177 references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2178 defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2179 return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2180 the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2181 constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2183 For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2184 the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2185 @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2186 @emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2187 a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2188 alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2189 does not include r0 on the output.
2192 @node Stack and Calling
2193 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2194 @cindex calling conventions
2196 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2197 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2205 * Register Arguments::
2207 * Aggregate Return::
2216 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2217 @cindex stack frame layout
2218 @cindex frame layout
2220 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2221 Here is the basic stack layout.
2224 @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2225 @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2226 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2227 pointer to a smaller address.
2229 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2230 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2231 definition used does not matter.
2233 @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2234 @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2235 Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2236 offsets from the frame pointer.
2238 @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2239 @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2240 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2241 addresses on the stack.
2243 @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2244 @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2245 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2247 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2248 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2249 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2250 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2251 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2252 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2254 @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2255 @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2256 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2257 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2258 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2260 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2261 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2263 @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2264 @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2265 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2266 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2269 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2270 the first argument's address.
2272 @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2273 @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2274 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2275 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2277 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2278 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2279 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2281 @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2282 @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2283 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2284 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2285 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2288 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2289 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2290 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2292 @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2293 @item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2294 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2295 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2296 on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2297 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2300 @findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2301 @item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2302 If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2303 the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2304 The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2305 machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2306 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
2308 @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2309 @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2310 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2311 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2312 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2313 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2314 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2316 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2317 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2318 determine the return address of other frames.
2320 @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2321 @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2322 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2323 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2325 @findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2326 @item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2327 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2328 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2329 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2330 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2333 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2334 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2336 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2337 DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2339 @findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2340 @item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2341 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2342 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2343 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2344 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2345 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2347 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2348 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2350 @findex ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2351 @item ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2352 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2353 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2354 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2355 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2356 during virtual register instantiation.
2358 The default value for this macro is @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl)},
2359 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2360 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2361 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2362 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2364 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2365 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2370 Define this macro if the stack size for the target is very small. This
2371 has the effect of disabling gcc's builtin @samp{alloca}, though
2372 @samp{__builtin_alloca} is not affected.
2375 @node Stack Checking
2376 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2378 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2379 the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2383 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2384 will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2385 appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2386 @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GCC will do not other special processing.
2389 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2390 called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GCC will call that
2391 pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2392 value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2393 the stack pointer is out of range.
2396 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2397 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2400 Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GCC
2401 will use the third approach.
2404 @findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2405 @item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2406 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2407 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2408 is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2409 checking in some more efficient way than GCC's portable approach.
2410 The default value of this macro is zero.
2412 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2413 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2414 An integer representing the interval at which GCC must generate stack
2415 probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2416 than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2417 default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2419 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2420 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2421 A integer which is nonzero if GCC should perform the stack probe
2422 as a load instruction and zero if GCC should use a store instruction.
2423 The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2425 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2426 @item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2427 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2428 for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
2429 75 words should be adequate for most machines.
2431 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2432 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2433 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2434 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2435 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2436 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2437 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2438 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2440 @findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2441 @item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2442 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2443 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2444 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2445 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2446 use the default of four words.
2448 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2449 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2450 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2451 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2452 @samp{-fstack-check}.
2453 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2454 normally not need to override that default.
2458 @node Frame Registers
2459 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2461 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2462 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2465 @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2466 @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2467 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2468 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2469 the hardware determines which register this is.
2471 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2472 @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2473 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2474 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2475 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2476 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2478 @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2479 @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2480 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2481 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2482 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2483 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2484 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2485 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2486 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2487 used for the frame pointer.
2489 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2490 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2491 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2492 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2493 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2494 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2495 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2497 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2498 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2500 @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2501 @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2502 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2503 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2504 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2505 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2506 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2507 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2508 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2509 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2511 @findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2512 @item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2513 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2514 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2515 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2516 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2517 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2518 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2520 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2521 address from the stack.
2523 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2524 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2525 @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2526 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2527 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2528 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2529 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2530 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2531 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2532 not be defined.@refill
2534 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2536 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2537 defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2539 @findex STATIC_CHAIN
2540 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2542 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2543 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2544 @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2545 @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2546 as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2547 will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2548 the frame pointer.@refill
2550 @findex stack_pointer_rtx
2551 @findex frame_pointer_rtx
2552 @findex arg_pointer_rtx
2553 The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2554 @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2555 macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2557 If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2562 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2564 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2565 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2568 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2569 @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2570 A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2571 pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2572 nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2574 The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2575 according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2576 constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2577 with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2578 when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2580 In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2581 without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2582 automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2583 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2586 In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2587 register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2588 fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2590 @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2591 @findex get_frame_size
2592 @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2593 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2594 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2595 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2596 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2597 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2599 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2600 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2601 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2602 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2604 @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2605 @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2606 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2607 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2608 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2609 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2611 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2612 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2614 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2615 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2616 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2617 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2618 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2620 In this case, you might specify:
2622 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2623 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2624 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2625 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2628 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2629 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2631 @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2632 @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2633 A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2634 to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2635 @var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2636 is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2637 preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2640 @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2641 @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2642 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2643 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2644 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2647 @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2648 @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2649 Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2650 the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2651 @code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2652 a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2655 @node Stack Arguments
2656 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2657 @cindex arguments on stack
2658 @cindex stack arguments
2660 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2661 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2662 control passing certain arguments in registers.
2665 @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2666 @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2667 A C expression whose value is nonzero if an argument declared in
2668 a prototype as an integral type smaller than @code{int} should
2669 actually be passed as an @code{int}. In addition to avoiding
2670 errors in certain cases of mismatch, it also makes for better
2671 code on certain machines. If the macro is not defined in target
2672 header files, it defaults to 0.
2676 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
2678 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
2679 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
2680 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2681 it. When PUSH_ARGS is nonzero, PUSH_ROUNDING must be defined too.
2682 On some machines, the definition
2684 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2685 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2686 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2687 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2688 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2689 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2690 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2691 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2693 On some machines, the definition
2696 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2700 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2701 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2702 alignment. Then the definition should be
2705 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2708 @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2709 @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2710 @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2711 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2712 will be computed and placed into the variable
2713 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2714 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2715 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2717 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2720 @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2721 @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2722 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2723 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2726 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2727 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
2728 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
2730 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2731 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2733 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2734 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2736 @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2737 @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2738 @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2739 @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2740 Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2741 allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2742 in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2743 for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2744 function declaration.
2746 The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2747 we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2749 The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2750 that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2751 arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2752 arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2753 variable sized arguments on the stack.
2755 When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2756 called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2757 being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2758 In each case this value can be easily computed.
2760 When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2761 much space to reserve, GCC uses these two macros instead of
2762 @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2764 @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2765 @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2766 Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2767 reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2769 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2770 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2771 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2773 @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2774 @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2775 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2776 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2777 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2778 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2780 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2781 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2782 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2783 stack in its natural location.
2785 @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2786 @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2787 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2788 arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2789 function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2790 after the function returns.
2792 @var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2793 the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2794 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2795 From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2797 @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2798 describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2799 @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2800 From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2801 arguments (if known).
2803 When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
2804 will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2805 you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2806 by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2807 a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2808 in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2810 @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2811 stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2812 argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2814 On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2815 of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2816 calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2817 the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2818 convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2819 arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2820 nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2821 @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2822 number of arguments.
2825 @node Register Arguments
2826 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2827 @cindex arguments in registers
2828 @cindex registers arguments
2830 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2831 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2835 @findex FUNCTION_ARG
2836 @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2837 A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2838 in a register, and which register.
2840 The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2841 arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2842 the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2843 (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2844 which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2845 correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2847 The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2848 hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2849 argument on the stack.
2851 For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2852 pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2854 The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2855 used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2856 of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2857 @code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2858 describes where part of the argument is passed. In each
2859 @code{expr_list} the first operand must be a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2860 register in which to pass this part of the argument, and the mode of the
2861 register RTX indicates how large this part of the argument is. The
2862 second operand of the @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives
2863 the offset in bytes into the entire argument of where this part starts.
2864 As a special exception the first @code{expr_list} in the @code{parallel}
2865 RTX may have a first operand of zero. This indicates that the entire
2866 argument is also stored on the stack.
2868 @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2869 The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2870 where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2871 nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2872 by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2874 @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2875 @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2876 You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2877 in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2878 type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2879 is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2880 argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2881 defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2884 @findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2885 @item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2886 Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2887 to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2888 definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2891 @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2892 @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2893 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2894 that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2895 necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2898 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2899 the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2900 be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2901 where the arguments will arrive.
2903 If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2904 serves both purposes.@refill
2906 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2907 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2908 A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2909 argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2910 arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2911 pushed on the stack.
2913 On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2914 registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2915 first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2916 on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2917 structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2918 in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2919 compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2922 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2923 register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2924 @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2926 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2927 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2928 A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2929 If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2930 pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2931 The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2934 On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2935 definition of this macro might be
2937 #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2938 (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2939 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2941 @c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2943 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2944 @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2945 If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2946 responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2947 Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2948 routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2949 nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2950 ``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2951 determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2952 otherwise a copy must be made.
2954 @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2955 @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2956 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2957 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2958 the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2961 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2962 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2963 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2964 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2965 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2966 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2968 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2969 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2970 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2971 for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2972 type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2973 for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2974 if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2975 @var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2976 a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2977 for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2978 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2981 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2982 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2983 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2984 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2985 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2986 never both of them at once.
2988 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2989 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2990 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2991 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2992 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2994 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
2995 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC. The
2996 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2997 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2998 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2999 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3001 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3002 @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
3003 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
3004 @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
3005 values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
3006 Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
3007 the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
3009 This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
3010 on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
3011 used for arguments without any special help.
3013 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3014 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3015 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3016 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3017 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3018 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3020 The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
3021 multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
3024 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3025 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3026 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3027 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3029 @findex PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3030 @item PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3031 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3032 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3033 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3034 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3035 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3037 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3038 @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3039 If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
3040 of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
3041 @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
3043 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
3044 @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3045 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3046 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3047 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3048 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3049 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3052 @findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
3053 @item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
3054 If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
3055 respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
3056 argument is loaded first. This macro only affects arguments
3057 passed in registers.
3062 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3063 @cindex return values in registers
3064 @cindex values, returned by functions
3065 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3067 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3068 values---values that can fit in registers.
3071 @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3072 @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3073 Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
3074 declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
3076 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
3077 @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3078 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
3079 function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
3080 a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
3081 (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
3082 On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
3083 machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
3086 The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
3087 register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
3088 @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
3089 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
3091 If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
3092 promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
3095 If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
3096 node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3097 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3098 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3101 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
3102 types, because these are returned in another way. See
3103 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3105 @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
3106 @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3107 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
3108 so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
3109 the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
3111 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
3112 the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
3113 defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
3116 If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3117 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3119 @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3120 aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3121 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3123 @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3124 @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3125 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3126 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3127 being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3128 (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3129 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3130 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3133 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3134 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3135 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3138 The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3139 data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3141 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3142 @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3143 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3144 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3146 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3147 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3148 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3152 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3155 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3156 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3157 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3159 @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3160 @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3161 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3162 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3163 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3166 @node Aggregate Return
3167 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3168 @cindex aggregates as return values
3169 @cindex large return values
3170 @cindex returning aggregate values
3171 @cindex structure value address
3173 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3174 cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3175 (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3176 block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3177 is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3179 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3183 @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3184 @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3185 A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3186 values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3187 to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3188 always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3189 @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3191 Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3192 by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3193 takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3194 possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3195 definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3196 values, and 0 otherwise.
3198 Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3199 be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3202 @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3203 @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3204 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3205 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3206 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3207 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3208 and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3210 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3212 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3213 @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3214 If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3215 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3217 @findex STRUCT_VALUE
3219 If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3220 @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3221 where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3222 an ``invisible'' first argument.
3224 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3225 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3226 On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3227 is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3228 caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3229 be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3231 If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3232 register, define this macro as the register number.
3234 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3235 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3236 If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3237 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3238 called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3239 the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3240 pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3241 ``invisible'' first argument.
3243 @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3244 @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3245 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3246 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3247 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3249 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3250 pass an address to the subroutine.
3252 This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3253 nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3257 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3259 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3260 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3261 must live across calls.
3264 @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3265 @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3266 Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3267 any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
3268 for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3269 by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3270 levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
3272 @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3273 @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3274 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3275 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3276 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3277 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3279 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3280 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3282 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE
3283 @item HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3284 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3285 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3286 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3287 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3288 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3291 @node Function Entry
3292 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3293 @cindex function entry and exit
3297 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3298 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3301 @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3302 @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3303 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3304 function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3305 initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3306 saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3307 local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3308 stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3310 The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3311 macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3313 @findex regs_ever_live
3314 To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3315 @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3316 @var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3317 prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3318 call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3319 @code{regs_ever_live}.)
3321 On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3322 not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3323 they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3324 appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3325 registers are used in the function.
3327 @findex frame_pointer_needed
3328 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3329 function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3330 pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3331 frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3332 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3333 time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3335 The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3336 required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3337 listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3338 order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3339 stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3340 the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3341 for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3342 compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3343 or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3344 need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3348 @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3349 A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3350 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3351 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3352 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3353 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3354 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3355 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3356 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3357 features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3360 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3361 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3362 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3363 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3364 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3368 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3369 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3370 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3371 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3374 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3375 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3376 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3377 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3380 Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3381 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3382 variable @code{current_function_is_leaf} is nonzero for such a function.
3384 @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3385 @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3386 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3387 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3388 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3389 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3391 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3392 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3393 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3394 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3396 @findex EPILOGUE_USES
3397 @item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3398 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3399 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3400 pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3402 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3403 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3404 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3405 function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3406 registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3407 called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3408 same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3409 registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3410 @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3412 On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3413 of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3414 instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3415 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3417 Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3418 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3419 to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3420 @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3421 switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3422 condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3424 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3425 function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3426 two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3427 is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3428 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3429 a function that needs a frame pointer.
3431 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3432 treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
3433 is nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3435 On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3436 others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3437 given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3438 number of arguments.
3440 @findex current_function_pops_args
3441 Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3442 functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3443 know what was decided. The variable that is called
3444 @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3445 arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3446 @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3447 @c tell? --mew 5feb93
3449 @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3450 @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3451 Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3452 instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3453 definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3454 representing the number of delay slots there.
3456 @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3457 @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3458 A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3459 slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3461 The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3462 being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3463 eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3464 of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3465 If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3466 may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3467 (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3470 @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3471 @findex final_scan_insn
3472 The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3473 list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3474 @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3475 delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3476 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3477 insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3479 You need not define this macro if you did not define
3480 @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3482 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3483 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3484 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3485 function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3486 inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3487 adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3490 First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3491 contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3492 contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3493 in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3494 e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3495 all other incoming arguments.
3497 After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3498 @code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3499 not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3500 return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3502 The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3503 the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3504 of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3505 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3507 The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3508 have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3509 some targets, but probably not.
3511 If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3512 frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3513 @var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3514 not support varargs.
3518 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3519 @cindex profiling, code generation
3521 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3524 @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3525 @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3526 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3527 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3530 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3531 your operating system environment, not by GCC. To figure them out,
3532 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3533 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3535 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3536 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3537 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3538 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3540 @findex NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3541 @item NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3542 Define this macro if the @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does
3543 not need a counter variable allocated for each function. This is true
3544 for almost all modern implementations. If you define this macro, you
3545 must not use the @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3547 @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3548 @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3549 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3550 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3552 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3553 @vindex profile_block_flag
3554 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3555 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3556 assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3557 object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
3558 distinguishes two profile modes.
3561 @findex __bb_init_func
3562 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3563 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3564 object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3565 allocated in the object module.
3567 The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3570 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3573 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3574 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3575 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3576 that you know will result.
3578 The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3579 object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3580 and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3581 nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3582 generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3585 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3595 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3596 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3597 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3598 and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3599 for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3600 first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3601 that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3602 module has been initialized already.
3604 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3607 parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3608 call __bb_init_trace_func
3612 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3613 @vindex profile_block_flag
3614 @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3615 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3616 assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3617 block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
3618 @code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
3621 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3622 Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3623 numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3624 associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3625 @var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3626 symbol made with this statement:
3629 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3632 @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3633 @c That is not an error.
3634 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3635 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3636 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3637 that you know will result.
3639 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3642 inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3646 @findex __bb_trace_func
3647 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3648 Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3649 call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3652 @code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3653 basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3654 the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3655 module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3656 with this statement:
3659 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3662 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3664 move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3665 move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3666 call __bb_trace_func
3670 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3671 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3672 @vindex profile_block_flag
3673 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3674 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3675 assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3676 assembler code should only be output
3677 if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3678 macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3679 a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3680 you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3681 as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3682 the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3684 @findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3685 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3686 @findex __bb_trace_func
3687 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3688 @item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3689 A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3690 be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3691 @code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3692 task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3693 string @var{id}, to obtain a unique label name.
3695 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3696 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3697 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3698 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3699 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3701 @findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3702 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3703 @findex __bb_trace_func
3704 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3705 @item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3706 A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3707 condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3709 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3710 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3711 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3712 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3713 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3715 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3716 @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3717 A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3718 support block profiling.
3722 @subsection Permitting inlining of functions with attributes
3725 By default if a function has a target specific attribute attached to it,
3726 it will not be inlined. This behaviour can be overridden if the target
3727 defines the @samp{FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P} macro. This macro
3728 takes one argument, a @samp{DECL} describing the function. It should
3729 return non-zero if the function can be inlined, otherwise it should
3733 @subsection Permitting tail calls to functions
3735 @cindex sibling calls
3738 @findex FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3739 @item FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL (@var{decl})
3740 A C expression that evaluates to true if it is ok to perform a sibling
3743 It is not uncommon for limitations of calling conventions to prevent
3744 tail calls to functions outside the current unit of translation, or
3745 during PIC compilation. Use this macro to enforce these restrictions,
3746 as the @code{sibcall} md pattern can not fail, or fall over to a
3751 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3752 @cindex varargs implementation
3754 GCC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3755 @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3756 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3757 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3758 conditionals to include it.
3760 ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3761 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3762 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3763 to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3764 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3765 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3767 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3768 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3772 @findex __builtin_saveregs
3773 @item __builtin_saveregs ()
3774 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3775 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3776 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3777 you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3779 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3780 control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3781 it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3784 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3785 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3786 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3787 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3788 to use them for its own purposes.
3789 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3792 @findex __builtin_args_info
3793 @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3794 Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3797 In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3798 arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3799 on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3800 arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3801 To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3802 have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3803 registers in each category have been used so far
3805 @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3806 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3807 with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3808 value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3810 Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3811 of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3812 value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3813 have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3814 values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3816 @findex __builtin_next_arg
3817 @item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3818 This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3819 arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3820 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3821 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3822 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3823 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3824 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3825 of the current function.
3827 @findex __builtin_classify_type
3828 @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3829 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3830 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3831 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3832 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3833 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3835 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3836 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3837 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3839 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3840 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3843 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3846 @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3847 @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS ()
3848 If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3849 for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3850 very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3851 The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3852 value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3854 @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3855 @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3856 This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3857 defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3858 anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3859 appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3860 done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3861 machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3863 The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3864 structure, containing the values that are obtained after processing the
3865 named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3866 last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3868 The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3869 stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3870 arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3871 @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3872 @var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3873 additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3875 Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3876 compile time without knowing their data types,
3877 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3878 a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3881 If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3882 arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3883 happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3884 end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3885 not generate any instructions in this case.
3887 @findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3888 @item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3889 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3890 argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
3892 This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
3893 is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3894 nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3895 arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3896 zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3897 are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3898 are treated as named.
3900 You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
3902 @findex PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3903 @item PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3904 If you need to conditionally change ABIs so that one works with
3905 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS}, but the other works like neither
3906 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} nor @code{STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING} was
3907 defined, then define this macro to return nonzero if
3908 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is used, zero otherwise.
3909 Otherwise, you should not define this macro.
3913 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3914 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3915 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3917 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3918 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3919 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3920 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3923 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3924 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3925 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3926 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3927 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3928 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3929 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3932 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3933 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3934 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3935 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3936 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3937 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3941 @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3942 @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3943 A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3944 block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3945 code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3948 If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3949 for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3950 code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3951 to generate it on the spot.
3953 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3954 @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3955 The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3956 trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3957 a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3958 the section containing read-only data.
3960 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3961 @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3962 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3964 @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3965 @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3966 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3968 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3969 is used for aligning trampolines.
3971 @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3972 @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3973 A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3974 @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3975 an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3976 RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3979 @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3980 @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3981 A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3982 expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3983 space for the trampoline.
3985 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3986 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3987 If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3988 a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3989 are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3990 area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3991 using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3992 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3994 @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3995 describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3996 the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3997 @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3998 trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3999 allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
4003 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
4004 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
4005 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
4006 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
4008 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
4009 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
4010 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
4011 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
4012 latter makes initialization faster.
4014 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
4015 the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
4018 @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
4019 @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
4020 The total size in bytes of the cache.
4022 @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
4023 @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
4024 The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
4025 lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
4026 fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
4027 entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
4028 always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
4030 @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
4031 @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
4032 The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
4036 Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
4037 the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
4040 @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
4041 @item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
4042 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
4043 cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
4044 INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
4045 cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
4046 @code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
4050 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
4051 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
4052 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
4053 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
4054 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
4057 @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4058 @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4059 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
4060 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
4061 which will be compiled with GCC. They go in a library function named
4062 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
4064 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
4065 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
4066 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
4067 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4068 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4069 special assembler code.
4073 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4074 @cindex library subroutine names
4075 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4077 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4078 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4081 @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
4082 @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
4083 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4084 multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
4085 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
4086 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4088 @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
4089 @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
4090 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4091 division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
4092 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
4093 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4095 @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
4096 @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
4097 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4098 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4099 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
4100 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4102 @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
4103 @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
4104 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4105 remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
4106 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4107 @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4109 @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4110 @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4111 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4112 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4113 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4114 @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4116 @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
4117 @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
4118 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4119 multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
4120 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
4121 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4123 @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4124 @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4125 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4126 division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
4127 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
4128 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4130 @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4131 @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4132 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4133 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4134 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
4135 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4137 @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
4138 @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
4139 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4140 remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
4141 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4142 @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4144 @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4145 @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4146 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4147 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4148 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4149 @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4151 @findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4152 @item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4153 Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
4154 routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
4155 initializing all the normal library routines.
4157 @findex FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4158 @item FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL
4159 Define this macro as a C statement that returns nonzero if a call to
4160 the floating point comparison library function will return a boolean
4161 value that indicates the result of the comparison. It should return
4162 zero if one of gcc's own libgcc functions is called.
4164 Most ports don't need to define this macro.
4167 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4169 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4170 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4171 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4172 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4175 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4176 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4177 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4178 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4179 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4181 @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4182 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4184 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4185 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4186 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4187 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4189 @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4190 @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4191 @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4192 @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4193 @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4194 @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4195 Define this macro if GCC should generate calls to the System V
4196 (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4197 rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4199 @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4200 @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4201 Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4202 library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4203 macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4204 routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4205 machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4206 differently, such as the i860.
4208 @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4209 @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4210 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4211 pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4212 of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4214 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4215 traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4216 to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4217 ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4219 On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4220 you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4221 the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4224 @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4225 Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4226 @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4227 passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4230 @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4231 @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4232 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4233 return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4236 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4237 traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4238 @code{float} into @code{double}.
4241 @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4242 Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4243 @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4244 return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4245 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4247 These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4248 C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4250 A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4251 @code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4252 @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4253 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4255 If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4256 the value through that union.
4258 @findex nongcc_SI_type
4259 @item nongcc_SI_type
4260 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4261 @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4263 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4266 @findex nongcc_word_type
4267 @item nongcc_word_type
4268 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4269 word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4271 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4274 @findex perform_@dots{}
4275 @item perform_@dots{}
4276 Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4277 arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4278 library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4279 of these macros and their arguments.
4281 On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4282 the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4284 @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4285 @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4286 Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4287 the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4288 involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4289 at once to the method-lookup library function.
4291 The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4292 to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4295 @node Addressing Modes
4296 @section Addressing Modes
4297 @cindex addressing modes
4299 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4300 This is about addressing modes.
4303 @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4304 @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4305 @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4306 @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4307 @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4308 @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4309 @itemx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4310 @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4311 A C expression that is non-zero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4312 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4314 @findex HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4315 @findex HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4316 @item HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4317 @itemx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4318 A C expression that is non-zero if the machine supports pre- or
4319 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4320 the size of the memory operand.
4322 @findex HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4323 @findex HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4324 @item HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4325 @itemx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4326 A C expression that is non-zero if the machine supports pre- or
4327 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4329 @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4330 @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4331 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4332 is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4333 @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4334 in which constant addresses are supported.
4337 @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4338 not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4339 @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4340 addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4342 @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4343 @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4344 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4345 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4346 the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4349 @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4350 @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4351 A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4352 executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4353 target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4355 It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4356 subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4359 This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4360 non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4361 must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4362 allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4363 contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4364 with no hard register must be rejected.
4366 The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4367 accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4368 register is required.
4370 @findex REG_OK_STRICT
4371 Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4372 macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4373 @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4374 in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4376 Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4377 for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4378 among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4379 Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4380 levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4382 Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4383 and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4384 constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4385 specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4386 recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4388 Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4389 sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4390 @code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4391 naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4392 be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4394 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4395 On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4396 the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4397 macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4398 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4399 @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4400 @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4403 @findex saveable_obstack
4404 The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4405 beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4406 the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4407 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4408 output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4409 access the original name string.
4411 You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4412 the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4413 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4415 @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4416 @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4417 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4418 RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4419 should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4420 others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4421 controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4422 requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4423 controls the one actually used.
4425 @findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4426 @item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4427 A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4428 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4429 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4430 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4431 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4432 @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4434 @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4435 @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4436 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4437 RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4439 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4440 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4441 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4442 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4443 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4444 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4445 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4446 only if neither labeling works.
4448 @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4449 @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4450 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4451 memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4452 C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4455 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4459 to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4461 @findex break_out_memory_refs
4462 @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4463 and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4466 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4467 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4468 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4470 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4471 address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4472 fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4473 machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4475 @findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4476 @item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4477 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4478 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4479 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4480 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4481 performance reasons.
4483 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4484 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4485 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4486 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4487 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4488 LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4489 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4492 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4493 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4494 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4495 of reload internals.
4497 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4498 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4499 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4502 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4503 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4504 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4506 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4507 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4508 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4509 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4512 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4513 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4514 the address has become legitimate.
4517 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4518 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4519 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4520 top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4521 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4522 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4524 @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4525 @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4526 A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4527 @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4528 different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4529 reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4532 Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4533 effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4534 of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4535 addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4537 You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4539 @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4540 @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4541 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4542 an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4543 @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4544 @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4545 anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4548 @node Condition Code
4549 @section Condition Code Status
4550 @cindex condition code status
4552 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4553 This describes the condition code status.
4556 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4557 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4558 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4559 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4560 currently based, and several standard flags.
4562 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4563 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4564 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4567 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4568 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4569 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4570 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4572 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4574 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4575 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4576 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4577 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4578 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4579 define this macro to initialize it.
4581 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4583 @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4584 @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4585 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4586 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4587 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4588 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4591 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4593 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4594 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4595 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4596 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4597 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4598 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4599 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4600 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4601 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4602 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4603 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4604 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4605 condition code value.
4607 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4608 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4609 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4610 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4611 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4612 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4613 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4615 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4616 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4617 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4618 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4620 @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4621 @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4622 A list of additional modes for condition code values in registers
4623 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). This macro should expand to a sequence of
4624 calls of the macro @code{CC} separated by white space. @code{CC} takes
4625 two arguments. The first is the enumeration name of the mode, which
4626 should begin with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}. The second is a C
4627 string giving the printable name of the mode; it should be the same as
4628 the first argument, but with the trailing @samp{mode} removed.
4630 You should only define this macro if additional modes are required.
4632 A sample definition of @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is:
4634 #define EXTRA_CC_MODES \
4635 CC(CC_NOOVmode, "CC_NOOV") \
4636 CC(CCFPmode, "CCFP") \
4637 CC(CCFPEmode, "CCFPE")
4640 @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4641 @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4642 Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4643 operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4644 example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4645 @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4649 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4650 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4651 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4652 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4653 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4654 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4657 You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4659 @findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4660 @item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4661 On some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4662 convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4663 does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4664 comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4666 On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4667 required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4668 and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4669 comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4670 @var{op1} as required.
4672 GCC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4673 valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4676 You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4679 @findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4680 @item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4681 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4682 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4683 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4684 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4686 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4687 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4688 For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4689 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4692 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4698 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4699 @cindex costs of instructions
4700 @cindex relative costs
4701 @cindex speed of instructions
4703 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4704 on the target machine.
4708 @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4709 A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4710 of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4711 expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4712 @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4713 reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4714 of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4715 the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4716 @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4717 found in @var{outer_code}.
4719 @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4720 obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4723 @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4724 @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4725 Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4726 This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4727 instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4728 @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4729 instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4730 @var{x} is contained.
4732 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4733 are adequate for the target machine.
4735 @findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4736 @item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4737 This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4738 @code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4739 to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4740 calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4741 not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4742 @code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4743 the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4744 calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4747 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4748 are adequate for the target machine.
4750 @findex ADDRESS_COST
4751 @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4752 An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4753 @var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4754 the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4756 For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4757 true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4758 instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4759 all addresses will have equal costs.
4761 In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4762 the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4763 cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4765 For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4766 and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4767 is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4768 references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4769 the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4770 that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4771 instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4772 specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4774 Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4776 @var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4777 is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4778 assigned a different cost.
4780 On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4781 cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4782 @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4783 over a region of code where only one would have been if
4784 @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4785 be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4786 probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4787 on machines with lots of registers.
4789 This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4792 @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4793 @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4794 A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4795 @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4796 the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4797 default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4799 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4800 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4801 registers if they are not general registers.
4803 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4804 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4805 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4806 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4807 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4808 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4810 @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4811 @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4812 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4813 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4814 is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4815 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4816 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4817 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4819 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4820 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4821 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4822 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4823 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4824 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4826 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4827 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4828 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4829 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4830 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4831 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4832 are the same as to this macro.
4836 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4837 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4840 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4841 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4845 @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4846 @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4847 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4848 than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4849 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4850 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4851 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4853 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4854 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4855 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4856 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4857 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4858 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4860 @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4861 @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4862 Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4863 to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4864 that is known to be zero.
4866 If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4867 recognize RTL structures like this:
4870 (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4874 and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4876 @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4877 @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4878 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4879 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4880 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4883 When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4884 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4885 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4886 Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4887 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4889 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4890 this macro is defined, it should produce a non-zero value when
4891 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is non-zero.
4893 @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4894 @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4895 Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4896 (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4901 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4902 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4903 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4904 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4906 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4907 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4908 the number of such sequences.
4910 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4912 @findex MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
4913 @item MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4914 A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
4915 copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
4916 will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4917 than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4919 @findex MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4920 @item MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4921 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4922 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4924 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT
4925 @item USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4926 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4927 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4928 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4930 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT
4931 @item USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4932 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4933 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4934 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4936 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT
4937 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4938 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4939 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4940 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4942 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT
4943 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4944 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4945 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4946 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4948 @findex USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT
4949 @item USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4950 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4951 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4952 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4954 @findex USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT
4955 @item USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4956 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdeccrement is a good
4957 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4958 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4960 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT
4961 @item USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4962 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4963 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4964 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4966 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT
4967 @item USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4968 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4969 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4970 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4972 @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4973 @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4974 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4975 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4977 @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4978 @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4979 Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4980 itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4984 @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4985 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4986 based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4987 @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4988 make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4989 specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4990 incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4992 @findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4993 @item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4994 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4995 priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4996 to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4997 @var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4998 adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
5002 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
5003 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
5004 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
5006 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
5007 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
5008 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
5009 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
5010 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
5013 The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
5014 macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
5015 can also define additional sections.
5018 @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5019 @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5020 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
5021 operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
5022 @code{".text"} is right.
5024 @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
5025 @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
5026 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
5027 operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
5028 Normally @code{".data"} is right.
5030 @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
5031 @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
5032 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5033 assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
5034 not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
5036 @findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5037 @item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5038 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5039 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
5040 data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
5041 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
5042 output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
5043 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
5045 @findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5046 @item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5047 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5048 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
5049 shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
5052 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5053 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5054 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5055 assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
5056 code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does not
5059 @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
5062 @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
5063 A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
5064 @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
5065 on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
5067 @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
5068 @findex text_section
5069 @findex data_section
5070 @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
5071 One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
5072 functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
5073 @code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
5074 macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
5076 @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
5077 @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
5078 On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
5079 placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
5080 this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
5081 @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
5082 switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
5084 If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
5087 @findex SELECT_SECTION
5088 @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
5089 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
5090 output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
5091 @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
5092 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5093 relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
5094 of the alternatives for other sections.
5096 Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
5097 constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
5099 @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5100 @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
5101 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
5102 output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
5103 is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
5104 except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
5105 calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
5108 Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
5111 @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5112 @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5113 Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
5114 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5115 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5116 readonly data section is used.
5118 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5120 @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5121 @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
5122 Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
5123 depending on something about the variable or function named by the
5124 symbol (such as what section it is in).
5126 The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
5127 @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
5128 The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
5131 @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
5132 The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
5133 @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
5134 modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
5137 @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5138 @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
5139 Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
5140 the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
5141 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
5143 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
5144 @item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
5145 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
5146 into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
5147 define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
5148 @samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
5151 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION
5152 @item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
5153 A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
5154 STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
5155 @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
5156 link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GCC will use
5157 the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name. Note - this
5158 macro can now be called for unitialised data items as well as
5159 initialised data and functions.
5163 @section Position Independent Code
5164 @cindex position independent code
5167 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5168 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5169 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
5170 @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
5171 well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
5172 @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
5173 contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
5174 switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
5175 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5176 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5179 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5180 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5181 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5182 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5183 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
5184 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5185 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5186 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5189 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5190 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5191 Define this macro if the register defined by
5192 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
5193 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5195 @findex FINALIZE_PIC
5197 By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
5198 and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
5199 shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
5200 programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
5201 requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
5202 special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
5204 The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
5205 codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
5206 before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
5207 inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
5208 included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
5211 @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
5212 @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5213 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5214 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5215 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5216 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5217 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5218 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5219 position independent code.
5222 @node Assembler Format
5223 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5225 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5226 to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
5230 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5231 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5232 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5233 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5234 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5235 and termination routines.
5236 * Macros for Initialization::
5237 Specific macros that control the handling of
5238 initialization and termination routines.
5239 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5240 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5241 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5242 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5245 @node File Framework
5246 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5247 @cindex assembler format
5248 @cindex output of assembler code
5250 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5251 This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5254 @findex ASM_FILE_START
5255 @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5256 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5257 some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5259 Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5260 @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5261 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5262 checking for certain assembler constructs.
5264 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5265 see @file{attasm.h}.
5267 @findex ASM_FILE_END
5268 @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5269 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5270 some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5272 If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5273 special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5276 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5277 see @file{attasm.h}.
5279 @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5280 @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5281 A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
5282 the object file as having been compiled with GCC (or another
5285 If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5286 is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5287 on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5288 GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5289 symbol table of an executable.
5291 On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5292 some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5293 define this macro with an empty body.
5295 @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5296 @item ASM_COMMENT_START
5297 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5298 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5299 the end of the line.
5303 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5304 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5305 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5306 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5307 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5311 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5312 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5313 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5314 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5316 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5317 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5318 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5319 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5320 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5322 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5323 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5325 @findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5326 @item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5327 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5328 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5329 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5330 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5331 of the filename using this macro.
5333 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5334 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5335 A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5336 for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5337 stdio stream @var{stream}.
5339 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5340 information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5342 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5343 @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5344 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5345 @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5346 macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5348 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
5349 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
5350 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5351 @var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
5352 @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5353 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5354 relocations. Some target formats do not support
5355 arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5357 At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5358 When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5360 @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5362 A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5363 precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5364 statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5369 @subsection Output of Data
5371 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5372 This describes data output.
5375 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5376 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5377 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5378 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5379 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5380 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5381 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5382 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5383 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5384 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5385 instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5386 @code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5387 @code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5388 will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5389 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5392 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5393 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5394 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5395 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5396 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5397 @findex output_addr_const
5398 @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5399 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5400 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5401 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5402 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5403 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5404 instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5405 respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5406 be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5407 @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5408 as an assembler expression.@refill
5410 For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5411 would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5412 a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5415 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5416 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5417 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5418 instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5422 A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5423 single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5426 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5427 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5428 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5429 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5430 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5431 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5433 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5434 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5435 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5437 @findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5438 @item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5439 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5440 expression to have a non-zero value if GCC should output the constant
5441 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5442 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5443 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5444 pool before the function.
5446 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5447 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5448 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5449 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5450 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5451 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5452 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5453 immediately after this call.
5455 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5458 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5459 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5460 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5461 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5462 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5464 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5465 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5466 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5467 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5468 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5471 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5472 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5473 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5474 Here is how to do this:
5477 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5480 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5481 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5482 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5484 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5486 @findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5487 @item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5488 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5489 @var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5490 function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5491 function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5493 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5494 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5495 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5496 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5497 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5498 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5499 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5501 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5504 @findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5505 @item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5506 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5507 used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5509 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5510 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5513 @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5514 @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5515 @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5516 @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5517 These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5518 in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5519 definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5522 #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5523 #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5527 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5528 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5531 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5532 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5533 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5534 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5535 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5536 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5537 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5538 floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5539 @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5540 output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5541 point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5542 element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5543 @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5545 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5546 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5549 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5550 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5551 This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5552 decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5553 You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5554 of space to hold the result.
5556 The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5557 as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5560 @node Uninitialized Data
5561 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5563 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5564 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5567 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5568 @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5569 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5570 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5571 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5572 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5574 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5575 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5576 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5578 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5579 common global variables are output.
5581 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5582 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5583 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5584 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5585 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5586 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5587 as the number of bits.
5589 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5590 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5591 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5592 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5593 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5594 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5595 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5596 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5598 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5599 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5600 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5601 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5604 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5605 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5606 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5607 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5608 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5609 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5611 Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5612 defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5613 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5614 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5615 the name, and a newline.
5617 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5618 variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5619 @code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5620 is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5621 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5622 or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5623 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
5625 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5626 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5627 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5628 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5629 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5630 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5631 as the number of bits.
5633 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5634 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5636 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5637 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5638 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5639 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5642 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5643 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5644 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5645 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5646 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5647 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5649 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5650 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5651 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5653 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5654 static variables are output.
5656 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5657 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5658 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5659 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5660 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5661 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5662 as the number of bits.
5664 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5665 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5666 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5667 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5668 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5669 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5670 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5671 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5673 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5674 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5675 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5676 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5681 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5683 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5684 This is about outputting labels.
5687 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5688 @findex assemble_name
5689 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5690 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5691 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5692 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5693 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5694 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5696 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5697 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5698 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5699 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5700 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5701 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5702 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5703 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5705 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5706 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5708 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5709 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5710 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5711 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5712 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5713 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5714 representing the function.
5716 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5718 @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5719 @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5720 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5721 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5722 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5723 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5724 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5726 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5727 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5729 @findex ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL
5730 @item ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5731 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5732 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5733 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5735 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5738 @findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5739 @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5740 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5741 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5742 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5743 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5744 something about the size of the object.
5746 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5749 @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5750 @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5751 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5752 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5753 that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5754 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5755 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5756 for making that name global, and a newline.
5758 @findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5759 @item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5760 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5761 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5762 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5763 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5764 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5765 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5766 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5768 If you don't define this macro, GCC will not support weak
5769 symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5771 @findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5773 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5775 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5776 definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5777 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5778 you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5781 @findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5782 @item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5783 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5784 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5785 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5786 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5787 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5788 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5790 @findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5791 @item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5792 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5795 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5796 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5797 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5798 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5799 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5800 be emitted as one-only.
5802 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5803 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5804 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5805 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5806 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5807 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5810 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5811 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5813 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5814 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5815 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5816 pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5817 library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5818 is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5820 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5821 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5823 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5824 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5825 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5826 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5827 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5828 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5829 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5831 @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5832 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5833 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5834 Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5835 The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5836 a reference to the label @var{label}.
5839 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5840 @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5841 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5842 name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5844 It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5845 used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5846 will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5848 It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5849 object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5850 should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5851 beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5852 convention your system uses, and follow it.
5854 The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5857 fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5860 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME
5861 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5862 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} the string
5865 The default definition of this macro is as follows:
5868 fprintf (@var{stream}, "%s:\n", LABEL_ALTERNATE_NAME (INSN))
5871 @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5872 @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5873 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5874 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5876 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5877 produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5878 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5880 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5881 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5882 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5883 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5884 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5885 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5886 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5888 @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5889 @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5890 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5891 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5892 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5893 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5895 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5896 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5897 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5898 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5899 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5900 internal static variables in different scopes.
5902 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5903 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5904 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5905 between the name and the number will suffice.
5907 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5908 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5909 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5910 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5913 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5914 correct for most systems.
5916 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS
5917 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5918 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5919 which defines (equates) the symbol whoes tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5920 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5921 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5922 the tree nodes are available.
5924 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5925 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5926 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5927 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5928 the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5929 @var{high} minus @var{low}. GCC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5930 and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5931 resolves into a constant.
5934 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5935 correct for most systems.
5937 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5938 @item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5939 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5940 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5943 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5944 ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5946 @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5947 @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5948 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5949 Objective C methods.
5951 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5952 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5953 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5956 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5957 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5958 systems define other ways of computing names.
5960 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5961 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5962 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5963 50 characters extra.
5965 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5966 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5967 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5968 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5970 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5971 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5974 @node Initialization
5975 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5976 @cindex initialization routines
5977 @cindex termination routines
5978 @cindex constructors, output of
5979 @cindex destructors, output of
5981 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5982 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5983 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5984 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5985 @code{main} is called.
5987 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5988 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5991 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5992 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5993 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5994 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5996 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5997 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5998 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
6000 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
6001 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
6002 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
6003 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
6004 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
6006 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
6007 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
6008 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
6009 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
6010 pointer containing zero.
6012 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
6013 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
6014 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
6015 list; destructors in forward order.
6017 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
6018 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
6019 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
6020 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
6021 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
6022 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
6023 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
6024 Termination functions are handled similarly.
6026 To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
6027 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
6028 you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
6030 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
6031 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
6032 support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
6033 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
6034 program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
6037 ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
6040 The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
6041 section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
6042 the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
6043 parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
6044 user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
6045 code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
6047 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6050 If no init section is available, do not define
6051 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
6052 the text section like all other functions, and resides in
6053 @file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
6054 inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6055 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
6056 in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
6058 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6059 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6060 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6061 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6062 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6063 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6064 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6065 the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6066 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6067 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6068 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6069 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6070 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6071 the initialization process.
6073 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6074 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6075 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
6076 this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
6077 @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
6078 recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
6079 linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
6080 linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running the ordinary
6081 linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
6082 termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
6085 Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
6086 of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
6087 These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
6088 sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
6089 configuration file. These files are:
6093 For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
6096 For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
6099 For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
6102 For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
6105 For the VMS operating system.
6109 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6110 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6113 @node Macros for Initialization
6114 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6116 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6117 and termination functions:
6120 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6121 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6122 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
6123 the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GCC will
6124 assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
6125 sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
6126 controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
6127 initialization functions.
6129 @item HAS_INIT_SECTION
6130 @findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
6131 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6132 This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
6133 init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6134 be defined explicitly for systems that support
6135 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6137 @item LD_INIT_SWITCH
6138 @findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
6139 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6140 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6142 @item LD_FINI_SWITCH
6143 @findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
6144 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6145 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6148 @findex INVOKE__main
6149 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6150 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6151 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6152 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6154 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6155 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
6156 Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
6157 the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
6158 initialization time.
6160 Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
6161 automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
6162 the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
6163 performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
6166 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
6167 call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
6168 some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
6169 which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
6172 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6173 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
6174 This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
6175 functions rather than initialization functions.
6177 When @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} are
6178 defined, the initializaiton routine generated for the generated object
6179 file will have static linkage.
6182 If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
6183 constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
6184 object file for constructor functions to be called. On such systems you
6185 must not define @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}
6186 as the object file's initialization routine must have global scope.
6188 On certain kinds of systems, you can define these macros to make
6189 @code{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6192 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6193 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6194 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6195 object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6196 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6198 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6199 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6200 Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
6201 @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
6202 for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6204 These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
6205 part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
6207 @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6208 @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6209 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6210 to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6213 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6214 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6215 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6216 termination functions in shared libraries:
6220 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
6221 program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
6223 @findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
6224 @item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
6225 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6226 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
6227 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6228 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6229 code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
6230 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
6234 @node Instruction Output
6235 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6237 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6238 This describes assembler instruction output.
6241 @findex REGISTER_NAMES
6242 @item REGISTER_NAMES
6243 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6244 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6245 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6247 @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6248 @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6249 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6250 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6251 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6252 to registers using alternate names.
6254 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
6255 @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6256 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6257 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6259 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6260 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6261 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6262 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6263 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6264 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6265 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6266 so that it will not be output twice.
6268 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6269 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6270 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6271 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6272 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6274 @findex recog_operand
6275 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6276 elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6278 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6281 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6282 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6283 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6284 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6285 they will be output differently.
6287 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6288 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6289 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6290 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6291 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6292 by changing the contents of the vector.
6294 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6295 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6296 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6297 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6298 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6299 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6301 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6303 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6304 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6305 If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6306 @code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6307 @var{noperands} will be zero.
6309 @findex PRINT_OPERAND
6310 @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6311 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6312 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6315 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6316 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6317 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6318 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6319 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6320 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6321 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6324 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6325 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6326 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6327 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6329 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6330 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6331 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6334 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6335 @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6336 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6337 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6338 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6339 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6342 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6343 @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6344 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6345 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6346 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6348 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6349 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6350 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6351 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6352 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6354 @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6355 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6356 @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6357 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6358 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6359 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6360 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6363 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6364 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6365 explicit (e.g. with white space).
6367 @findex final_sequence
6368 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6369 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6370 when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6371 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6372 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6375 @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6376 @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6377 @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6378 @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6380 @item REGISTER_PREFIX
6381 @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6382 @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6383 @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6384 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6385 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6386 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6387 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6388 files can define these macros differently.
6390 @item ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS(@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6391 @findex ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS
6392 If defiend this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6393 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6394 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6395 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6396 statements. Noet that upper case letters are reserved for future
6397 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6398 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6399 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6400 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6401 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6403 @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6404 @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6405 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6406 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6407 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6410 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6411 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6412 templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6413 of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6414 @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6415 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6416 characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6418 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6419 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6420 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6422 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6423 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6424 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6425 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6426 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6427 opcodes or operand order.
6429 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6430 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6431 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6432 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6433 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6436 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6437 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6438 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6439 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6440 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6444 @node Dispatch Tables
6445 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6447 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6448 This concerns dispatch tables.
6451 @cindex dispatch table
6452 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
6453 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6454 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6455 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6456 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6457 definitions of these labels are output using
6458 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6459 way here. For example,
6462 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6463 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6466 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6467 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6468 CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
6469 @var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6470 mode and flags can be read.
6472 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6473 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6474 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6475 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6477 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6478 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6479 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6480 definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6484 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6487 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6488 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6489 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6490 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6491 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6492 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6493 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6495 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6498 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6499 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6501 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6502 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6503 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6504 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6505 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6506 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6507 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6508 of the preceding label.
6510 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6514 @node Exception Region Output
6515 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6517 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6519 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6523 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6524 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6525 A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6527 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6529 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6530 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6531 A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6533 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6535 @findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6536 @item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6537 A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6538 exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6539 section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6540 sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6541 or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6542 @code{readonly_data_section}.
6544 @findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6545 @item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6546 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6547 the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6548 defined, GCC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6549 named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6550 appropriate section.
6552 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6553 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6555 @findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6556 @item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6557 A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6560 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6562 @findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6563 @item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6564 Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6565 finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6567 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6569 @findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6570 @item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6571 A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6572 have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6573 for details on when to define this, and how.
6575 @findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6576 @item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6577 An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6578 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6580 @findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6581 @item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6582 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6583 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6584 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6585 @samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6586 or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
6589 If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6590 exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6593 If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6594 instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6598 @node Alignment Output
6599 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6601 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6602 This describes commands for alignment.
6605 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6606 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6607 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6610 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6611 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6614 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6615 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6616 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6617 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}
6620 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6621 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6622 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying
6623 @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}. This works only if
6624 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6627 @item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6628 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6629 a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
6631 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6632 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6635 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6636 to set the variable @var{align_loops} in the target's
6637 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6638 selection in @var{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6640 @findex LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6641 @item LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6642 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LOOP_ALIGN}.
6643 This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6646 @item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6647 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6648 If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6649 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6651 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6652 to set the variable @var{align_labels} in the target's
6653 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6654 selection in @var{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6656 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6657 @item LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6658 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LABEL_ALIGN}.
6659 This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6661 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6662 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6663 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6664 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6665 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6666 expression of type @code{int}.
6668 @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6669 @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6670 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6671 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6672 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6673 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6676 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6677 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6678 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6679 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6680 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6682 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN
6683 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6684 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6685 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6686 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6687 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6688 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6692 @node Debugging Info
6693 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6695 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6696 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6699 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6700 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6701 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6702 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6703 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6707 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6709 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6710 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6713 @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6714 @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6715 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6716 register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6717 expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6718 registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6719 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6720 the compiler and another for DBX.
6722 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6723 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6724 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6725 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6726 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6728 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6729 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6730 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6732 @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6733 @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6734 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6735 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6736 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6737 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6738 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6739 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6740 @samp{-g} options is used.
6742 @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6743 @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6744 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6745 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6748 @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6749 @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6750 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6751 produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6752 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6753 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6754 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6757 When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6758 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6759 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6760 @code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GCC uses the
6761 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6762 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6764 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6765 user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
6766 @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
6770 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6772 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6773 These are specific options for DBX output.
6776 @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6777 @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6778 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6779 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6781 @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6782 @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6783 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6784 in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6786 @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6787 @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6788 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6789 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6790 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6791 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6792 if there is any occasion to.
6794 @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6795 @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6796 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6797 in the text section.
6799 @findex ASM_STABS_OP
6801 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6802 @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6803 define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6804 DBX debugging information format.
6806 @findex ASM_STABD_OP
6808 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6809 @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6810 location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6811 This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6813 @findex ASM_STABN_OP
6815 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6816 @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6817 define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6818 DBX debugging information format.
6820 @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6822 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6823 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6824 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6825 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6827 @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6828 @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6829 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6830 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6831 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6832 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6833 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6834 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6835 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6837 @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6838 @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6839 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6840 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6841 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6842 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6843 if backslash is correct for your system.
6845 @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6846 @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6847 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6848 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6851 @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6852 @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6853 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6854 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6856 @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6857 @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6858 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6859 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6860 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6862 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6863 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6864 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6865 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6866 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6868 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6869 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6870 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6871 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6872 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6874 @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6875 @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6876 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6877 parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6879 @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6880 @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6881 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6882 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6883 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6886 @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6887 @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6888 Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6889 precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6890 that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6893 @findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6894 @item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6895 Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6896 block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6897 of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6899 @findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6901 Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6902 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6903 macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6904 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6905 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6906 number for a type number.
6910 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6912 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6913 These are hooks for DBX format.
6916 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6917 @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6918 Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6919 information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6920 argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6921 @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6923 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6924 @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6925 Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6927 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6928 @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6929 Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6930 output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6931 (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6932 for the type @var{type}.
6934 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6935 @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6936 Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6937 end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6938 be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6939 to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6942 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6943 @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6944 Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6945 standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6946 @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6947 global symbols, including names of data types.
6949 Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6950 and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6951 particular language in no particular order.
6953 On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6954 first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6955 those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6956 don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6958 Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6959 are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6960 another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6961 particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6967 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6968 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6970 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6976 This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6978 See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6979 the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6981 Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6983 @c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6987 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6988 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6989 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6991 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6992 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6994 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6995 dbxout_symbol (decl);
7001 @findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
7002 @item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
7003 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
7004 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
7005 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
7006 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
7010 @node File Names and DBX
7011 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
7013 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7014 This describes file names in DBX format.
7017 @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
7018 @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
7019 Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
7022 Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
7025 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
7026 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7027 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7028 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
7029 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
7030 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
7032 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7033 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7035 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
7036 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7037 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7038 @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
7039 compilation is named @var{name}.
7041 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7042 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7044 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
7045 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7046 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
7047 compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
7049 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
7050 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
7052 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
7053 @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7054 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7055 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
7056 file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
7057 source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
7058 or a @samp{#line} command.
7060 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7061 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7066 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
7068 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7069 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
7072 @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7073 @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7074 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
7075 for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7077 @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
7078 @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
7079 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf format debugging output
7080 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7082 @findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7083 @item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7084 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
7085 debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7087 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7088 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7089 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7090 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7091 as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7093 @findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7094 @item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7095 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
7096 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
7097 (@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GCC will output this
7098 information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7100 @findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
7101 @item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
7102 Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
7103 Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GCC will use Dwarf
7104 version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
7105 of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
7107 @findex DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
7108 @item DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
7109 By default, the Dwarf 2 debugging information generator will generate a
7110 label to mark the beginning of the text section. If it is better simply
7111 to use the name of the text section itself, rather than an explicit label,
7112 to indicate the beginning of the text section, define this macro to zero.
7114 @findex DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7115 @item DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7116 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7117 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7118 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7120 @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7121 @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7122 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7123 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7124 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7125 not define them yourself.
7129 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7130 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7131 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7132 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7135 @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
7136 @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
7137 Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
7138 name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
7141 @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7142 @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7143 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7144 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7145 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7148 @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7149 @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7150 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7151 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7152 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7155 @node Cross-compilation
7156 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7157 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7158 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7160 While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
7161 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7162 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7163 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7164 doing the compilation.
7167 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7168 range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
7169 machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
7170 must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
7171 cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
7172 it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
7173 folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
7176 The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
7177 compiling between different floating point formats.
7179 Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
7180 use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
7182 You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
7183 of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
7186 @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7187 @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7188 A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
7189 in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
7190 @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
7192 @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
7193 @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
7194 A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
7195 @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7197 @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
7198 @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
7199 A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
7200 @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
7201 interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
7204 @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
7206 @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
7207 A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
7208 function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
7209 representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
7210 type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
7213 @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
7214 @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
7215 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7216 floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
7217 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7219 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
7220 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
7221 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7222 floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
7223 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7225 @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
7226 @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7227 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7228 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
7229 as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
7230 and so does the value.
7232 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
7233 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7234 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7235 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
7236 (but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
7237 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
7239 @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
7240 @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
7241 A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
7242 type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
7243 representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
7244 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7246 @findex REAL_INFINITY
7248 Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
7249 therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
7251 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
7253 @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
7254 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7255 point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
7256 By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
7258 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
7260 @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
7261 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7262 point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
7263 @code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
7266 @cindex constant folding and floating point
7267 Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
7268 point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
7269 define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
7270 will not happen for floating point values.
7273 @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
7274 @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
7275 A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
7276 the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
7277 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
7278 produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
7279 in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
7281 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
7282 which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
7283 @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
7284 @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
7286 @cindex overflow while constant folding
7287 The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
7288 If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
7289 @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
7290 arithmetic operation requested.
7292 @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
7293 @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
7294 A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
7295 point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
7296 have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
7297 floating point representation.
7299 There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
7300 can't happen in the negation operation.
7302 @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
7303 @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
7304 A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
7305 @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
7307 Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
7308 floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7309 However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
7310 properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
7313 There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
7315 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
7316 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
7317 A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
7318 @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
7319 @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
7321 @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
7322 @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
7323 A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
7324 found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
7325 into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
7326 The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
7327 and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7330 @node Mode Switching
7331 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7332 @cindex mode switching
7333 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7336 @findex OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING
7337 @item OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7338 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7339 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7341 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7342 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7343 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7344 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7345 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7346 be inserted before reload, i.e. you can't put this into instruction emitting
7347 or MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG.
7349 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7350 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7351 return non-zero for any @var{entity} that that needs mode-switching.
7352 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7353 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{MODE_NEEDED},
7354 @code{MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE} and @code{EMIT_MODE_SET}.
7355 @code{NORMAL_MODE} is optional.
7357 @findex NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7358 @item NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7359 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7360 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7361 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7362 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7363 The position of the initializer in the initializer - starting counting at
7364 zero - determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7366 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7367 represented as numbers 0 .. N - 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7368 switch is needed / supplied.
7371 @item MODE_NEEDED (@var{entity}, @var{insn})
7372 @var{entity} is an integer specifying a mode-switched entity. If
7373 @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} is defined, you must define this macro to
7374 return an integer value not larger than the corresponding element in
7375 NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING, to denote the mode that @var{entity} must
7376 be switched into prior to the execution of INSN.
7379 @item NORMAL_MODE (@var{entity})
7380 If this macro is defined, it is evaluated for every @var{entity} that needs
7381 mode switching. It should evaluate to an integer, which is a mode that
7382 @var{entity} is assumed to be switched to at function entry and exit.
7384 @findex MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE
7385 @item MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE (@var{entity}, @var{n})
7386 This macro specifies the order in which modes for ENTITY are processed.
7387 0 is the highest priority, NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING[ENTITY] - 1 the
7388 lowest. The value of the macro should be an integer designating a mode
7389 for ENTITY. For any fixed @var{entity}, @code{mode_priority_to_mode}
7390 (@var{entity}, @var{n}) shall be a bijection in 0 ..
7391 @code{num_modes_for_mode_switching}[@var{entity}] - 1 .
7393 @findex EMIT_MODE_SET
7394 @item EMIT_MODE_SET (@var{entity}, @var{mode}, @var{hard_regs_live})
7395 Generate one or more insns to set @var{entity} to @var{mode}.
7396 @var{hard_reg_live} is the set of hard registers live at the point where
7397 the insn(s) are to be inserted.
7401 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7402 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7404 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7405 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7408 @item PREDICATE_CODES
7409 @findex PREDICATE_CODES
7410 Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7411 @file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7412 array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7413 predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7414 predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7415 predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7416 of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7419 #define PREDICATE_CODES \
7420 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7421 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7424 Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7425 incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7426 predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7427 the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7428 thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
7429 in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
7432 @item SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7433 @findex SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7434 Define this if you have special predicates that know special things
7435 about modes. Genrecog will warn about certain forms of
7436 @code{match_operand} without a mode; if the operand predicate is
7437 listed in @code{SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES}, the warning will be
7440 Here is an example from the IA-32 port (@code{ext_register_operand}
7441 specially checks for @code{HImode} or @code{SImode} in preparation
7442 for a byte extraction from @code{%ah} etc.).
7445 #define SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES \
7446 "ext_register_operand",
7449 @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7450 @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7451 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7452 elements of a jump-table should have.
7454 @findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7455 @item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7456 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7457 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7458 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7459 To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7460 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7461 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7462 flags can be updated.
7464 @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7465 @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7466 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7467 should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7468 relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
7470 @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7471 @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7472 Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7473 value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7474 actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7476 @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7477 @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7478 Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7479 is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7480 The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7481 five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7483 @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7484 @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7485 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7486 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7487 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7489 @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7490 @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7491 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7492 memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7493 bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7494 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7495 of @var{mode} for which the
7496 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7497 @code{NIL} for other modes.
7499 This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7500 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7501 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7502 @code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7503 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7505 @findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7506 @item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7507 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7510 @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7511 @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7512 An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7513 of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7514 @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7516 @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7517 @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7518 Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7519 point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7522 @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7524 An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7525 compile code for in the general case. It may be
7526 @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7527 @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7528 they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7529 when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7530 choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7534 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7535 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7537 @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7539 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7540 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7541 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7542 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7545 @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7546 @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7547 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7548 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7549 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7550 this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7551 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7552 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7553 instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7554 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7555 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7556 arguments to bitfield instructions.
7558 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7559 position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7560 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7562 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7563 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7564 bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7565 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7566 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7568 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7570 @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7571 @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7572 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7573 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7574 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7575 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7577 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7579 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7580 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7581 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7582 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7583 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7584 such cases may improve things.
7586 @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7587 @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7588 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7589 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7590 (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7591 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7592 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7594 A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7595 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7596 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7597 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7598 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7599 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7600 @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7601 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7604 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7605 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7606 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7607 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7608 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7609 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7610 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7614 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7621 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7625 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7626 tested into the sign bit.
7628 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7629 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7630 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7631 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7632 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7633 comparison operators and let us know
7635 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7638 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7641 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7642 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7643 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7648 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7649 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7650 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7651 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7652 combine the normalization with other operations.
7655 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7656 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7660 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7661 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7665 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7668 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7669 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7670 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7671 those cases, e.g., one matching
7674 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7677 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7678 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7679 @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7680 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7681 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7682 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7683 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7684 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7686 You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7689 @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7690 @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7691 A C expression that gives a non-zero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7692 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7693 Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7694 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7699 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7700 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7701 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7702 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7703 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7705 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7706 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7707 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7710 @findex FUNCTION_MODE
7712 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7713 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7714 should be @code{QImode}.
7716 @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7717 @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7718 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7719 function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7720 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7722 The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7723 arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7724 threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7726 @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7727 @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7728 Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7729 and print no error message.
7731 @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7732 @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7733 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7734 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7735 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7736 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7738 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7741 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{getc}, @var{ungetc}, @var{name})
7742 Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7743 is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the
7744 macro, zero otherwise. The argument @var{getc} is a function of type
7745 @samp{int (*)(void)} which will return the next character in the input
7746 stream, or EOF if no characters are left. The argument @var{ungetc} is
7747 a function of type @samp{void (*)(int)} which will push a character back
7748 into the input stream. The argument @var{name} is the word following
7749 #pragma in the input stream. The input stream pointer will be pointing
7750 just beyond the end of this word. The input stream should be left
7751 undistrubed if the expression returns zero, otherwise it should be
7752 pointing at the next character after the end of the pragma. Any
7753 characters remaining on the line will be ignored.
7755 It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7756 only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7757 compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7758 programs which already use it.
7760 If the pragma can be implemented by atttributes then the macro
7761 @samp{INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} might be a useful one to define as well.
7763 Note: older versions of this macro only had two arguments: @var{stream}
7764 and @var{token}. The macro was changed in order to allow it to work
7765 when gcc is built both with and without a cpp library.
7767 @findex HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7770 @item HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7771 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want the System V style
7772 pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(<n>)} and @samp{#pragma weak <name>
7773 [=<value>]} to be supported by gcc.
7775 The pack pragma specifies the maximum alignment (in bytes) of fields
7776 within a structure, in much the same way as the @samp{__aligned__} and
7777 @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A pack value of zero resets
7778 the behaviour to the default.
7780 The weak pragma only works if @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} and
7781 @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} are defined. If enabled it allows the creation
7782 of specifically named weak labels, optionally with a value.
7784 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7787 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7788 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want to support the Win32
7789 style pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(push,<n>)} and @samp{#pragma
7790 pack(pop)}. The pack(push,<n>) pragma specifies the maximum alignment
7791 (in bytes) of fields within a structure, in much the same way as the
7792 @samp{__aligned__} and @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A
7793 pack value of zero resets the behaviour to the default. Successive
7794 invocations of this pragma cause the previous values to be stacked, so
7795 that invocations of @samp{#pragma pack(pop)} will return to the previous
7798 @findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7799 @item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7800 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7801 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7802 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7804 @findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7805 @item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7806 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7807 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7808 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7810 @findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7811 @item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7812 If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7813 @var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7814 and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7817 @findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7818 @item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7819 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7820 newly defined @var{type}.
7822 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7823 @item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7824 Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7825 If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7826 @var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7827 called and returned 1.
7829 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7830 @item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7831 Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7832 If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7833 @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7834 of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7835 overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7838 @findex INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7839 @item INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (@var{node}, @var{attr_ptr}, @var{prefix_ptr})
7840 Define this macro if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
7841 when it is being created. This is normally useful for backends which
7842 wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
7843 the pragma's effect. The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
7844 created. The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
7845 for this decl. The @var{prefix_ptr} is a pointer to the list of
7846 attributes that have appeared after the specifiers and modifiers of the
7847 declaration, but before the declaration proper.
7849 @findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7850 @item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7851 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7852 newly defined @var{decl}.
7854 @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7855 @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7856 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
7857 names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
7858 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7859 This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
7861 @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7862 @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7863 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7864 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7865 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7866 @samp{.} is used instead.
7868 @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7869 @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7870 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7871 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7872 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7873 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7875 @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7876 @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7877 Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7878 function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7879 value is explicitly returned).
7881 The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7882 appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7887 Define this if the target system lacks the function @code{atexit}
7888 from the ANSI C standard. If this macro is defined, a default definition
7889 will be provided to support C++. If @code{ON_EXIT} is not defined,
7890 a default @code{exit} function will also be provided.
7894 Define this macro if the target has another way to implement atexit
7895 functionality without replacing @code{exit}. For instance, SunOS 4 has
7896 a similar @code{on_exit} library function.
7898 The definition should be a functional macro which can be used just like
7899 the @code{atexit} function.
7903 Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7904 besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7905 terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
7906 only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
7907 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7909 @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7910 @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7911 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7912 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7913 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7914 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7915 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7916 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7917 you should define this macro.
7919 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7921 @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7922 @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7923 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7924 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7925 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7926 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7927 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7928 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7929 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7930 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7933 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7935 @findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7936 @item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7937 In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7938 dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7939 delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7940 statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7942 @findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7943 @item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7944 Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7945 unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7946 without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7947 symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7949 @findex MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7950 @item MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7951 A C statement that adds to @var{CLOBBERS} @code{STRING_CST} trees for
7952 any hard regs the port wishes to automatically clobber for all asms.
7956 A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7957 same time if the machine is a superscalar machine.
7959 @findex MD_SCHED_INIT
7960 @item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose})
7961 A C statement which is executed by the scheduler at the
7962 beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
7963 @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
7964 debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
7965 @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7967 @findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
7968 @item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready}, @var{clock}, @var{can_issue_more})
7969 A C statement which is executed by the scheduler after it
7970 has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
7971 it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
7972 @samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
7973 stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
7974 provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
7975 the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
7976 @var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
7977 scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
7978 @var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0]. @var{clock}
7979 is the timer tick of the scheduler. @var{can_issue_more} is an output
7980 parameter that is set to the number of insns that can issue this clock;
7981 normally this is just @code{issue_rate}.
7983 @findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
7984 @item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
7985 A C statement which is executed by the scheduler after it
7986 has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
7987 pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
7988 is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7989 @var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
7990 number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
7991 @samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
7992 value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
7994 @findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7995 @item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7996 Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
7997 operations other than load, store and copy operations.
7999 You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
8000 @code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
8003 @findex MATH_LIBRARY
8005 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
8006 in the system math library, or @samp{""} if the target does not have a
8007 separate math library.
8009 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"-lm"} is wrong.
8011 @findex LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
8012 @item LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
8013 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
8014 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
8016 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
8019 @findex TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW
8020 @item TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW
8021 Define this macro if the target supports file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW.
8022 Note that this functionality is part of POSIX.
8023 Defining @code{TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW} will enable the test coverage code
8024 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
8025 if the program has forked.
8027 @findex MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
8028 @item MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
8030 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
8031 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
8032 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
8033 1 if it does use cc0.
8035 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS
8036 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS
8037 A C expression to modify the tests in @code{TRUE_EXPR}, and
8038 @code{FALSE_EXPPR} for use in converting insns in @code{TEST_BB},
8039 @code{THEN_BB}, @code{ELSE_BB}, and @code{JOIN_BB} basic blocks to
8040 conditional execution. Set either @code{TRUE_EXPR} or @code{FALSE_EXPR}
8041 to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
8043 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN
8044 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN
8045 A C expression to modify the @code{PATTERN} of an @code{INSN} that is to
8046 be converted to conditional execution format.
8048 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL
8049 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL
8050 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
8051 converting code to conditional execution in the basic blocks
8052 @code{TEST_BB}, @code{THEN_BB}, @code{ELSE_BB}, and @code{JOIN_BB}.
8054 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL
8055 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL
8056 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
8057 converting code to conditional execution in the basic blocks
8058 @code{TEST_BB}, @code{THEN_BB}, @code{ELSE_BB}, and @code{JOIN_BB}.